Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Camera User Guide
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
ENGLISH
©CANON INC. 2014
CDD-E596-010
1
Before Use
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Before Use
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( )( ) ( )(
)
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 2 12 13
( )
8
( )
1
( )
9
( )
2
Camera Basics
(
10
)
)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
( )
3
(
11
(
14
)
(
15
)
( )( )
16 17
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
12
(
13
)
)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
4
(
) ( )
)
(
16 15 14
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)*2
(2) Microphone
(10) FUNC./SET button
(1) Zoom lever
(9) Speaker
(10) Flash
(11)
(12)
[
[
(Flash)] / Right button
Shooting:[
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(3) DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMITM terminal
(Display)] / Down button
[
(11) Control ring
(13) Indicator
Playback:[ (magnify)] /
(12)
(13) Wi-Fi antenna area
(14)
(N-Mark)*1
(15) Tripod socket
[
(Flash up)] switch
[
(2) Strap mount
(3) Lamp
(index)]
(5)
[
(Mobile Device Connection)] button
(14)
(15)
(16)
[
[
[
] button
(6) Control dial
(Playback)] button
(7)
[
[
(Ring function selector)] /
(Macro)] / [
(Manual focus)] /
(Single-image erase)] button
Left button
(4) Lens
Accessories
(8) Movie button
(9) (Drive mode)] / [
Up button
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
(16) Memory card/battery cover
(17) DC coupler terminal cover
(5) Exposure compensation dial
(6) Mode dial
[
(Wi-Fi)] /
Appendix
(7) Shutter button
(8) Power button
Index
z Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
4
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
Before Use
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
[
[
[
[
[
] Control ring (11) on front
] Up button (9) on back
] Left button (16) on back
] Right button (11) on back
] Down button (12) on back
] Control dial (6) on back
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
●
●
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
: Indicates touch-screen operations
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Before Use
Table of Contents
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
12
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
Before Use
Common Camera Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot
Poster Effect
“Aged” Photos
(
(
( 59)
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
Fish-Eye Effect
Miniature Effect
Toy Camera Effect
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
(
( 61)
-
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting people well
Background Defocus
Soft Focus
Monochrome
(
(
( 63)
● Focus on faces
Portraits
Against Snow
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
(
(
● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
-
Matching specific scenes
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
● Use Face ID
Night Scenes
Under Water
Fireworks
Starry Skies
( 66)
-
(
(
(
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
Accessories
-
Appendix
Index
13
View
Use Wi-Fi Functions
Before Use
● View images (Playback Mode)
● Send images to a smartphone
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
-
-
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
● Share images online
-
-
● On a TV
● Send images to a computer
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-
-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● On a computer
-
● Browse through images quickly
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
-
● Erase images
-
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
Print
● Print pictures
Accessories
-
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
Appendix
Index
-
14
● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial
light source.
Before Use
Safety Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This could damage your eyesight.
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
Camera Basics
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Warning
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
Accessories
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
Appendix
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
Index
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
●
Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods.
●
Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
15
Before Use
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Caution
Caution
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
Accessories
● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
Appendix
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
Index
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.
This could result in injury.
16
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Before Use
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Attach the strap.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic Guide
z Thread the end of the strap through the
strap hole (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Basic Operations
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
2
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
z The strap can also be attached to the left
side of the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your wrist.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
18
Charging the Battery Pack
Before Use
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
Insert the battery pack.
1
( )
1
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Camera Basics
z After aligning the
marks on the battery
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
( )
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Charge the battery pack.
2
( )
2
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
( )
1
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
CB-2LH
(
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
Open the cover.
1
z When charging is finished, the lamp turns
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
( )
1
green.
(2).
CB-2LHE
Remove the battery pack.
3
( )
1
Accessories
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
( )
2
( )
2
Appendix
Index
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
19
Insert the battery pack.
2
( )
1
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
Before Use
( )
2
z Holding the battery pack with the terminals
(1) facing as shown, press the battery lock
(2) in the direction of the arrow and insert
the battery pack until the lock clicks shut.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Remove the memory card.
Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The memory card will pop up.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
( )
1
Setting the Date and Time
z Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Turn the camera on.
1
Close the cover.
4
( )
2
z Press the power button.
Accessories
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Appendix
Index
( )
1
●
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
20
Set the date and time.
2
Changing the Date and Time
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
]
Access the menu screen.
1
z Press the [
] button.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [Date/Time].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ] tab.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Specify your home time zone.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
[
] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
press the [ ] button.
Change the date and time.
3
Finish the setup process.
4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
z Press the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
z To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
●
●
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
●
●
●
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
Accessories
adapter kit (sold separately,
off.
Appendix
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
Index
You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
].
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [
21
Display Language
Before Use
Trying the Camera Out
Change the display language as needed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enter Playback mode.
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
1
z Press the [
] button.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Access the setting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
] button.
Turn the camera on.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
Set the display language.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter [
] mode.
2
z Set the mode dial to [
].
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Accessories
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
●
●
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
Appendix
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
] button.
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
Compose the shot.
3
Index
You can also change the display language by pressing the
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
[
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ ] tab.
●
You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
22
Shoot.
4
Shooting Movies
Before Use
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
1) Start shooting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
( )
1
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It
will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
2) Finish shooting.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Accessories
Appendix
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Index
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
23
Play movies.
3
Viewing
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button to access the movie
control panel, choose [ ] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button again.
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enter Playback mode.
1
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
z Press the [
] button.
is finished, [
z To adjust the volume (1), press the
][ ] buttons.
] is displayed.
( )
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Your last shot is displayed.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Browse through your images.
2
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
[
] dial clockwise.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen in step 2, and to view the
previous image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z To return to single-image display from
Scroll Display mode, touch the image in
the middle of the screen.
z To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
[
] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [
]
dial to browse through images.
z Choose a movie, and touch [ ] to start
playback.
Accessories
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
Appendix
z Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
Index
24
Erasing Images
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose an image to erase.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the image.
2
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
]
●
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
z Press the power button to turn the
1
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Advanced Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
]
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
button.
]
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
Before Use
Shutter Button
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Power Saving in Playback Mode
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to shoot.)
2
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
●
●
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
(
●
●
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
27
Before Use
Shooting Modes
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
( )
4
z Tilt the screen up to 180° upward.
z When including yourself in shots, you can
view a mirror image of yourself by rotating
the screen around toward the front of the
camera. To cancel reverse display, press
( )
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the [
Disp.] on the [ ] tab, and press the
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
] button, choose [Reverse
( )
2
( )
5
( )
3
( )
6
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(5) Movie Mode
●
●
When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
For shooting movies
(
(
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(2) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
(6) Creative Filters Mode
(3) Special Scene Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
Shoot with optimal settings for
(4) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings
Accessories
(
Appendix
Index
28
Before Use
Shooting Display Options
Using the FUNC. Menu
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
Access the FUNC. menu.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ] button.
Display 1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a menu item.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Display 2
( )
2
( )
1
Choose an option.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
]
●
●
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
z Options labeled with a [
configured by pressing the [
] icon can be
] button.
] icon can be
Accessories
z Options labeled with a [
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
Appendix
Finish the setup process.
4
Index
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
29
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
Before Use
Using the Menu Screen
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
z Access the FUNC. menu (1) by pressing
the [ ] button, and then either drag the
menu up or down to scroll it, or touch a
menu item to choose it.
[
], playback [
], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Touch an option (2) to choose it. Touch
the option again to confirm your choice
and return to the screen displayed before
Access the menu screen.
1
Auto Mode /
z Press the [
] button.
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
you pressed the [ ] button.
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [
].
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
].
] icon by touching
Choose a tab.
[
2
z Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
z After you have pressed the [ ][
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Choose a menu item.
3
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose a menu item.
Appendix
z For menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
Index
]
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
30
Choose an option.
4
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● To access tabs, press the [
and then touch the desired tab.
] button to access the menu screen,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Finish the setup process.
5
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
z Press the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
] button in step 1.
] button to return to the
● Touch an option to choose it. Options shown with [ ][ ] icons on either
side can also be configured by touching these icons.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the menu item, and then touch to
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
choose the option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [
] instead of pressing the
[
] button, if you prefer.
● When [
[
] is shown, you can touch [
] button, if you prefer.
] instead of pressing the
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
31
Before Use
On-Screen Keyboard
Indicator Display
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
depending on the camera status.
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Indicator
Status
Color
Camera Status
Entering Characters
( )
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
On
z Touch the characters to enter them.
(
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Green
Auto Mode /
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images,
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ] or turn the [ ] ring.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch [ ].
z Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
Accessories
the function you are using.
Appendix
Deleting Characters
z To delete the previous character, either
Index
touch [
] or press the [ ] button.
z Holding down the [ ] button will delete
five characters at a time.
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
z Press the [
] button.
32
Before Use
Clock
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [ ] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Before Use
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
2
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
z Press the power button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The startup screen is displayed.
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
Enter [
] mode.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Set the mode dial to [
].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Accessories
Compose the shot.
3
Appendix
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A
zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
(2).)
Index
( )
1
( )
2
34
Shoot.
4
Shooting Movies
Before Use
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
1) Start shooting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
( )
1
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
z If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It
will fire when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the flash, push it down with your
finger, into the camera.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Accessories
3) Finish shooting.
Appendix
z Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Index
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
●
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Before Use
●
●
Digest movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
●
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds.
Enter [ ] mode.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
are changed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
Compose the shot.
2
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
focus.
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify
Shoot.
3
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
Still Images/Movies
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Accessories
●
If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
[
Appendix
●
●
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, because
Index
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
] mode, or
●
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
36
Still Images
Movies
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●
Keep your fingers away from the microphone (1) while shooting
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled.
●
●
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to
( )
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
●
●
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
●
●
Audio is recorded in stereo.
Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can
be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when
this option is used when there is no wind. When the wind is not
[Off].
●
You can change how long images are displayed after shots
Accessories
(
Appendix
Index
37
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
Scene Icons
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Background
Subject
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
People
(
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Moving People
Shadows on Face
Smiling
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
–
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Sleeping
Babies
Smiling Babies
Sleeping Babies
Moving Children
Other Subjects
Other Moving Subjects
●
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
Other Close-Range
Subjects
2
3
*
*
Index
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
38
Continuous Shooting Scenes
Image Stabilization Icons
Before Use
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [ ].
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[
] and [
] modes.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Sleeping
(including Babies)
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will
not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Children
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
●
●
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
Accessories
●
●
Appendix
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
●
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
In [
] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
and then select [
] dial).
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Index
[
39
On-Screen Frames
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
Still Images
Movies
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
1
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
●
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
( )
1
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
2
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on
the screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF
mode. Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue AF
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
●
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
Accessories
Appendix
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
Index
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
following step 1.
40
Using the Self-Timer
Before Use
●
[Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24, 28, 35, 50, 85 or 100 mm
(35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the
angle of view of those focal lengths.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z To change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Keep turning the [ ] ring to
increase the focal length, which changes
to 35, 50, 85, and 100 mm at each click.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
●
●
Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn
the [ ] ring.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
Accessories
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Appendix
Index
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
41
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Before Use
●
●
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required
between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter)
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
Enable touch-shutter function.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Touch
Choose [ ].
1
Shutter] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
]
button.
Configure the setting.
2
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the [Delay]
time, either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose the number of
[Shots], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Shoot.
2
Appendix
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z Touch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your finger immediately.
Index
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
(
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Off] in
step 1.
●
For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
●
Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
42
Image Display during Playback
Continuous Shooting
Before Use
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
Still Images
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
In [
the image is part of a group, [
screen.
] is displayed in the upper left of the
●
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Configure the setting.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
●
●
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
the group.
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
●
The following actions are not available for grouped images:
Shoot.
2
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
(
(
●
During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the
position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway.
Accessories
●
●
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Appendix
●
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
Index
●
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during continuous
shooting remain constant, after they are determined for the first shot.
43
Registering Face ID Information
Before Use
Using Face ID
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
Access the setting screen.
1
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Face
Camera Basics
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Personal Information
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
Register face information.
2
Accessories
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
Appendix
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Index
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
44
Continue registering face information.
5
Before Use
z After [Register?] is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
●
●
The flash will not fire when following step 2.
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
] mode.
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
]
Shooting
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
Save the settings.
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Accessories
z When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
[
Appendix
[
z Shoot.
Index
choose [Yes], and then press the [
button.
]
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
45
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Before Use
●
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
1
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
●
●
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a person to check or edit.
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the person to
●
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
check or edit, and then press the [
button.
]
●
●
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Check or edit the information as
needed.
3
[
] tab so that the names are not displayed.
●
If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
●
●
●
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
[
] button. On the screen displayed,
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
you can edit names or birthdays as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
Accessories
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button
on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
continue to be recorded in the same position as for the first shot,
even if subjects move.
Appendix
Index
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [
]
dial, and then press the [ ] button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
46
Choose the face info to overwrite.
3
Before Use
●
●
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Some characters entered with the software may not display on
the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
Register face information.
4
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
register the new face information.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as their
faces change quickly as they grow.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been filled.
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
1
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
●
●
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
Info] and press the [ ] button.
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of a
person whose face info you want to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
z If five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
47
Erasing Registered Information
Before Use
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Movies
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
1
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Info].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
2
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of a
person to erase, and then press the [
button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
]
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
●
●
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Accessories
Square aspect ratio.
Appendix
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
Index
●
●
You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring
Not available in [ ] mode.
48
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
29).
z Press the [
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
] button, choose [Hg
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 3:2 Images)
●
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
Accessories
●
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Appendix
cannot be changed.
Index
●
Not available in [
] mode.
49
Changing Movie Image Quality
Before Use
Helpful Shooting Features
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and choose the desired option
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
] in
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display the electronic level.
z The option you configured is now
1
displayed.
z Press the [ ] button several times to
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
display the electronic level.
process but choose [
].
Straighten the camera.
2
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
and (2) the left-right orientation.
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
Image
Quality
Resolution
Frame Rate
60 fps
Details
1920 x 1080
For shooting in Full HD
] enables movies with
smoother motion
( )
1
( )
2
[
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
30 fps
30 fps
●
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button, and on the [ ] tab, choose [Custom Display].
[
For shooting in HD
Accessories
Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level.
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
For shooting in standard
definition
●
●
640 x 480
30 fps
Appendix
●
Black bars (displayed on the top and bottom in [
and [ ] modes and on the left and right in [
indicate image areas not recorded.
], [
],
Index
●
●
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
] mode)
Not available in [ ] mode.
50
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Checking for Closed Eyes
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
[
Configure the setting.
Configure the settings.
1
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
z Press the [
] button, choose [Blink
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
Check the focus.
2
z [ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
●
●
When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the final shot.
Accessories
●
●
The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
Appendix
●
●
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
Index
This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
Not available in [ ] mode.
(
51
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Before Use
Customizing Camera Operation
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
[
(
] tab, and then press the [ ] button
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Configure the settings.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial to choose [Display Time]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
[
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Accessories
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Appendix
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
Hold
Off
Index
No image display after shots.
Configure the setting.
2
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
52
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Before Use
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
1
Configure the settings.
2
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off
Displays only the image.
Detailed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images, by pressing the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Before Use
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each
Shot (Creative Shot)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
3
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Other Shooting Modes
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shoot.
2
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
z To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [ ] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[
] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the original display, press the
] button.
Accessories
[
Appendix
●
Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
Index
●
●
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
54
Choosing Effects
Before Use
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
You can choose effects for images captured in [
] mode.
z After choosing [
] mode, turn the [
ring to choose the effect.
]
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto
All effects
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
Retro
Images resemble old photos
(
Monochrome
Special
Natural
Images are generated in one color
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Subdued, natural-looking images
Shoot.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
Index
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
55
ꢀ
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Before Use
●
●
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
In [ ] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
●
●
●
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
z This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating filter
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
ꢀ
ꢀ
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
●
●
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
z Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of fireworks.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
56
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Before Use
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focusing range, and then touching it again.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
Still Images
Movies
Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
compensating filter.
Auto Mode /
Configure the setting.
1
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Choose [ ].
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z Press the [ ] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
Choose white balance.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
] in the menu.
Shoot.
[
2
Focusing Range
Description
Adjust the setting.
3
Underwater Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for
z Turn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
Macro
Quick
even closer shots.
level for B and A, and then press the [
button.
]
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some distance
away. Especially effective for moving subjects.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Accessories
Manual
Focus
●
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 2, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
Appendix
focus range.
Index
●
●
In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
●
●
B represents blue and A, amber.
In [ ] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
●
preceding steps.
57
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Before Use
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Still Images
Movies
Enter [ ] mode.
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
Choose [ ].
2
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
].
(
[
Shoot.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Shoot.
3
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots in rich, vivid colors.
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Accessories
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
z Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
Index
●
●
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
●
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
●
[
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in bright conditions, which indicates that the camera will
automatically optimize image brightness.
58
Adding Artistic Effects
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
].
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.
[
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect.
Choose [ ].
1
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Choose an effect level.
2
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Art Bold
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Art Embossed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●
●
Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging
effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see
Accessories
The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Appendix
Index
59
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
Choose [ ].
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Choose [ ].
1
Choose an effect level.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
].
[
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
Choose the area to keep in focus.
3
2
z Press the [ ] button.
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
3
Accessories
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the speed.
Appendix
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
4
Index
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
60
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Speed
Playback Time
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
Choose [ ].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Auto Mode /
].
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
●
●
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a color tone.
2
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
]
Shoot.
3
To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
Standard
Warm
Shots resemble toy camera images.
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
Cool
●
●
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] and [ ] at
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
Accessories
Appendix
●
You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Index
61
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus)
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Choose [ ].
1
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
[
].
Choose an effect level.
[
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
Shoot.
2
level.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
z A blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Accessories
For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the
subject, and ensure ample distance between the subject and
background.
Appendix
●
●
There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
Index
62
Shooting in Monochrome
Before Use
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Choose [ ].
1
Still Images
Movies
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
].
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
[
Auto Mode /
Still Images
Movies
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a color tone.
2
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
press the [ ] button.
B/W
Black and white shots.
Sepia tone shots.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
Sepia
Blue
[
] button.
Blue and white shots.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
Aim the camera at a person.
2
Accessories
z Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
Appendix
z To pause smile detection, press the
[
] button. Press the [ ] button again to
Index
resume detection.
●
Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
63
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
3
Before Use
●
●
You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
available for the final shot.
is played.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Face the camera and wink.
4
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
●
●
●
Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
Choose [ ].
1
If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
press the [ ] button.
(
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
Accessories
available for the final shot.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
●
If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
[
] button.
Appendix
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
2
Index
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
z On the screen, touch the face of the
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
person who will wink to choose it (Touch
AF), and then press the shutter button
halfway.
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will wink.
64
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
4
Using the Face Self-Timer
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
z After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
84). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] button.
(
press the [ ] button.
●
●
Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
[
] button.
available for the final shot.
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
3
z The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
Accessories
z The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Appendix
Index
65
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
5
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Before Use
z The person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially firing
the flash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without flash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
z All the shots are combined to create a
single image.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
●
●
●
●
Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
press the [ ] button.
For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the flash is raised.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[
] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps
4 – 5 stays still.
Raise the flash.
2
z Move the [ ] switch.
Secure the camera.
3
Accessories
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
Shoot.
4
Index
z Press the shutter button. The flash fires
as the camera takes the first shot.
z The second and third shots are now
taken, without firing the flash.
66
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Before Use
●
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To adjust subject brightness, try changing the flash exposure
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
Choose [ ].
1
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
●
●
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Secure the camera.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
Shoot.
3
Accessories
Appendix
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Index
67
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
2
Before Use
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Secure the camera.
3
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Camera Basics
●
●
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
specify the focal position before shooting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
60 seconds.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
●
●
If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Choose [ ].
1
Accessories
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ ] tab ► [Night
(
Appendix
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
specify the focal position before shooting.
Index
[
] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
68
Shoot.
5
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Before Use
z Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briefly, and then shooting
begins.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 60 seconds.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
1
z The camera operates in Eco mode
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
(
Item
Effect
Options
Details
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose movie effects, such
as star trails.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[
] button.
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval between
each shot.
Shot Interval
Frame Rate
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Configure movie settings.
2
Choose the length of the
recording session. To record
until the battery runs out,
choose [Unlimited].
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min.,
Unlimited
z Press the [ ] button.
Shooting Time
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an item. Choose the desired
option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and
then press the [
] button.
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Secure the camera.
3
Interval between Shots
15 sec.
Frame Rate
Playback Time
16 sec.
Accessories
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
15 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
8 sec.
8 sec.
4 sec.
4 sec.
2 sec.
Check the brightness.
4
z Press the shutter button all the way down
Index
to shoot a single still image.
check image brightness.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level. Check brightness again
by taking another shot.
1 min.
69
Adjusting Colors
Before Use
●
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
Choose a shooting mode.
1
●
A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
[
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose color adjustment.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Sound is not recorded.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [
] tab ► [Night Display]
[
► [ ] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Adjust the setting.
3
z Turn the [ ] ring or press the [ ][
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
]
Stills] ► [On]. Note
that these individual images are managed as a single group, and
during playback, only the first image is displayed. To indicate that
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left
in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
●
●
●
B represents blue and A, amber.
Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [ ] mode.
Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
●
●
specify the focal position before shooting.
]
Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] and use an
AC adapter kit (sold separately,
about 8 hours, at most.
Accessories
●
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
Appendix
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing [ ] in steps
Advanced settings can be accessed by touching [
] when the
the setting screen, touching [ ], and then touching the same
option or [ ].
] to access
Index
70
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Before Use
Shooting Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
Shooting Movies in Standard Mode
Lock the exposure.
1
Still Images
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z To unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjust the exposure.
2
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Touch [ ] on the screen.
z Touch [ ][ ] to adjust the exposure.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the settings to suit the
2
3
Shoot.
3
●
●
The exposure compensation dial cannot be used.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
You can also adjust the exposure by turning the [ ] ring before
recording.
Accessories
●
You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ ]. [ ] is
then displayed.
Appendix
Index
71
Shooting iFrame Movies
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies
Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
The resolution is [
Accessories
Appendix
Index
72
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
4
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customize the settings as desired
2
P Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
●
●
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
which may enable adequate exposure.
Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
recording.
(
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
Accessories
(
Appendix
Index
73
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
●
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
●
●
AE: Auto Exposure
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial
(Program Shift).
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Metering Method
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
29).
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Evaluative
Lock the exposure.
1
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
Accessories
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
Appendix
[
] button.
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
z [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Spot
Index
z To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
74
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Changing the ISO Speed
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the ISO
speed.
Set the metering method to [ ].
1
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
].
[
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
Automatically adjusts the ISO
speed to suit the shooting
mode and conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [Spot
AUTO
AE Point] on the [ ] tab, and then
For shooting
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
125, 160, 200
Low
outdoors in fair
weather.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
For shooting in
cloudy conditions,
or at twilight.
Slightly
Low
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
●
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,
4000, 5000, 6400
Slightly
High
For shooting night
scenes, or in dark
rooms.
8000, 10000, 12800
High
Accessories
●
●
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
Appendix
Index
●
●
Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the [ ] button,
choosing [ ], choosing an option (either by pressing the [ ][
]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial), and then pressing the [ ] button.
To specify [AUTO], press the [ ] button on the setting screen.
75
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
●
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
●
You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when
choosing the ISO speed in the FUNC. menu, by pressing the
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
[
] button.
Choose [ ].
1
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Appendix
Index
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
76
Before Use
●
●
●
●
You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
●
●
]
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
for the final shot.
(
29).
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
To access the setting screen in step 2, you can either touch
[
] on the screen in step 1 or touch [
] on the exposure
Available ISO Speed
Options
Details
(
You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then
touching [ ].
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
[AUTO], [250] – [6400]
Tone down highlights by about 200%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
●
supported range if you have specified a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
Appendix
Index
●
Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
77
Shadow Correct
Before Use
Image Colors
Still Images
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to
3 stops).
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Auto
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Day Light
Shade
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
For shooting in the shade.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Tungsten
Fluorescent
●
●
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS
Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the
Accessories
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting.
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
Appendix
Underwater
Index
For manually setting a custom white balance
Custom
ND: Neutral Density
(
78
Configure advanced settings.
2
Custom White Balance
Before Use
z To configure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] ring
or [ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
]
z To reset the correction level, press the
Camera Basics
[
] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
the setting.
] button to complete
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
●
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
reset if you record custom white balance data.
●
●
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
You can also record white balance data on the screen above by
adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the [ ] ring
touching [
].
(
●
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds
on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature
unit representing color temperature conversion filter density)
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color-
compensating filter.
●
●
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
Appendix
You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [
step 1.
] in
Configure the setting.
1
Index
On the screen in step 2, you can touch [
] to restore the
original level and touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen.
z Turn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
79
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Before Use
●
●
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Custom Color
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
29).
Still Images
Movies
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Neutral
Configure the setting.
2
Sepia
Creates sepia tone images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
B/W
Creates black and white images.
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive film.
[
] dial.
Positive Film
z For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
Accessories
Lighter Skin Tone
Darker Skin Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darkens skin tones.
Appendix
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Blue
setting.
Index
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains,
foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Vivid Red
●
You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
Custom Color
80
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Before Use
Shooting Range and Focusing
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] (either
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
Specify the general focal position.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (1, which shows the distance and
focal position) and the magnified display
area, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
( )
1
z To adjust the magnification, press the [
button.
]
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
z During magnified display, you can move
the focusing frame by dragging on the
screen.
Accessories
Appendix
Fine-tune the focus.
3
Index
z Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
81
Before Use
●
●
●
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
settings cannot be changed.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
(
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
Choose [ ].
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
You can lock the focus during recording by touching [ ]. [ ] is
then displayed.
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
Accessories
●
●
Appendix
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [MF
●
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
Index
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
●
●
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
]
(
Configure the setting.
2
for the final shot.
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
82
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Before Use
●
●
To access the screen in step 2, you can either touch [ ] on the
screen in step 1 or touch [
] on the manual focus screen
Still Images
Movies
(
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar
on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Digital Tele-Converter
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1-point
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing. You can also
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
●
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
●
●
●
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
Accessories
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
Appendix
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
●
The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
Index
83
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point)
Before Use
●
On the screen in step 2, you can also move the AF frame by
touching the screen, restore the AF frame to the original position
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
by touching [
], or exit the setting by touching [
].
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [1-point].
Move the AF frame.
Face AiAF
1
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z You can turn the [ ] dial to move the AF
frame and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to fine-tune the position.
●
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To return the AF frame to the original
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
position in the center, press the [
button.
]
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Resize the AF frame.
2
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
[
●
When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
original size.
Finish the setup process.
3
(
] or [
z Press the [ ] button.
- [
- [
- [
]: 31 frames
]: 25 frames
] or [
Accessories
●
AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
]: 21 frames
●
●
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Appendix
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
Index
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
●
●
You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the
●
●
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab
(
84
Shooting with Servo AF
Changing the Focus Setting
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Configure the setting.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button, choose
z Press the [
] button, choose [Servo
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
On
Off
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
●
●
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specified AF frame mode.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
●
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
Accessories
●
●
●
AF lock shooting is not available.
Prepare the camera for Face Select.
1
Appendix
z Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(
Index
85
Enter Face Select mode.
2
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Before Use
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
1
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
] follows the subject within a certain
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
2
range.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose the face to focus on.
3
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].
z After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specified AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Accessories
Appendix
●
When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people
detected are not displayed when you have selected another,
unregistered face to focus on. However, their names will be
Index
86
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps
the Subject in Focus
Before Use
●
●
If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ ] tab, and
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
Configure the setting.
1
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to focus.
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Shoot.
2
Shooting with the AF Lock
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
Still Images
Movies
to shoot continuously.
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
z The images are managed together as a
Lock the focus.
1
●
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
●
●
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and
Accessories
the MF indicator are displayed.
z To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
button again.
●
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
Appendix
]
Index
while you touch the screen.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
●
87
Slow Synchro
Before Use
Flash
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Flash Mode
●
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
Still Images
Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
Auto Mode /
Raise the flash.
1
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Move the [ ] switch.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
Off
z Press the [ ] button, choose a flash
For shooting without the flash.
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
●
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash,
then configure the setting.
●
Adjustment is also possible by pressing the [ ] button, touching
the desired option, and then touching it again.
Accessories
Auto
Appendix
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Index
Fires for each shot.
88
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Shooting with the FE Lock
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
shots.
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Lock the flash exposure.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
z The flash fires, and when
] is displayed, the flash output level is
●
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
retained.
z To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
●
●
Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
Compose the shot and shoot.
3
z After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
Accessories
●
●
●
Appendix
by pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
FE: Flash Exposure
Index
89
Changing the Flash Timing
Before Use
Shooting RAW Images
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
with minimal loss of image quality.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
29).
Configure the setting.
2
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1st-curtain
2nd-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera
for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size.
However, the compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image
processing may also cause some loss of image quality.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed)
data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the
camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use the
software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality.
Accessories
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a
Appendix
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for
each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without
using the software.
Index
90
Before Use
Other Settings
●
●
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
(
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
Accessories
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Appendix
Mode] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
Index
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
Continuous
Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
91
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Before Use
●
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed
to a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button, choose [Night
Still Images
Movies
Display] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce significant camera shake.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.
[IS Settings] screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
●
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
92
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
5
Enter [ ] mode.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Set the shutter speed.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
15 – 1.3
[AUTO], [125] – [3200]
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
1 – 1/2000
●
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
●
●
●
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
Accessories
The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
flash fires.
Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
Appendix
Index
●
Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
●
●
[
]: Time value
You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
93
Before Use
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Set the aperture value.
2
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
2
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed
(1), and turn the [ ] ring to set the
aperture value (2).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
( ) ( )
1
2
( )
3
( )
4
●
●
[
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
To avoid exposure problems in [ ] and [ ] modes, you
Accessories
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
250 – 40
can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or
aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise
[125]
Appendix
be obtained. Press the [
] button and set [Safety Shift] on
30 – 1.3
[125] – [3200]
[125] – [12800]
1 – 1/2000
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
Index
●
You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
●
●
After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
●
94
Before Use
●
●
[
]: Manual
●
●
At ISO speeds other than [ ], an exposure level mark (4) based
on your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown
for comparison to the standard exposure level (3). [ ] or [ ] is
displayed when the difference from standard exposure exceeds
2 stops.
and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can also set the flash level in [
] or [
] mode by
Settings] ► [Flash Mode] ► [Manual].
●
●
●
Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
Camera Basics
pressing the [
] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] ring
adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [ ] dial adjusts the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
by pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose from the three flash levels in [ ] mode.
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Specify the flash mode.
2
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Flash Mode], press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [Manual], and then press the
Accessories
Appendix
[
] button.
Configure the setting.
3
Index
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose the
flash level, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
Maximum
95
Setup via Touch Operations
Before Use
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed using
touch operations. Settings can also be adjusted during recording.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
z Touch [ ], [ ], or [
] on the
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
screen, and then touch [ ][ ] to specify
a value.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Configure the settings.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.
Setup is not possible during recording by turning the [ ] dial or
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value.
[
] ring.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
●
●
Exposure can be locked before or during recording by touching
].
[
●
●
With [ ], the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, showing the difference from the standard
exposure level.
Focus can be locked during recording by touching [ ]. [
then displayed.
] is
Accessories
With settings other than [ ], an exposure level mark based on
your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for
comparison to the standard exposure level.
Appendix
Index
96
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Before Use
Customization for Shooting Styles
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode, and those assignments determine which functions you can assign
to the control dial.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing Control Ring Settings
Shooting Mode
Item
Still Images
Movies
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Av
–
Tv
–
ISO
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a function to assign to the
1
[
] ring.
ISO
Av
ISO
Tv
ISO
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
z Choose an option, either by pressing the
[
[
] or [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the
] ring or [ ] dial.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Configure the assigned function.
2
z Turn the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to
–
configure the assigned function.
Accessories
● When you assign [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to the [ ] ring,
the functions you can assign to the [ ] dial are the same as for [ ].
Appendix
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching an option to choose it, and then touching it again.
Index
●
●
●
Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
The [ ] ring can be used for step zooming in [
], [
], or
In [ ] mode, you can assign aperture value or shutter speed
adjustment to the ring.
97
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Using the Control Ring for Adjustment
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.
You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed, shutter
speed, and aperture value, as you touch the screen to switch between
these items.
Choose [ ].
1
z Following step 1 in “Changing Control
z Touch the right edge (in the area outlined,
in this example) to view menu items, drag
up or down to choose an item, and turn
the [ ] ring to specify a value.
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the shooting mode with
functions to assign.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1).
( )
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Functions you can assign to the control
dial will be updated automatically.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Note that the functions
shooting screen.
], and
[
] modes.
●
●
You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and
touching [ ] in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings”
(
ISO
Tv
ISO
Av
ISO
Tv
ISO
Accessories
On the setting screen, you can also configure the functions
assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then
Av
[
].
Appendix
Index
98
Customizing Display Information
Before Use
●
You can also choose an item to display by touching it.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
displayed in each display when the [ ] button is pressed in shooting
screen.
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [ ] or
movie button.
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button, choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[Custom Display] on the [ ] tab, and
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Set
button] on the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
button] or [Set
[
(
] tab, and then press the [ ] button
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an item, and then
press the [ ] button. Items you choose
for display are labeled with [ ].
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
z Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Use the assigned function as needed.
3
Shooting Info
Grid Lines
z To activate an assigned function, press
Displays a reference grid.
the button you assigned it to.
Electronic Level
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
], [
],
Histogram
Accessories
[
Appendix
●
●
Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
Index
Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
●
Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
99
Before Use
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
●
●
●
●
To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set
] in [Set button].
button] and
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
With [
], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the
[
With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
changes to [ ] or [ ].
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
] is then displayed.
the focus. [
With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [ ] tab,
- Open or close the screen
- Raise or lower the flash
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
Choose icons to include in the menu.
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial and then press the [
]
You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and
button to choose icons to include in the
FUNC. menu. Selected icons are marked
with a [ ].
then touching it again or touching [
].
z Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Accessories
z Items without a [ ] will be available on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Appendix
Configure the setting.
3
Index
z Press the [
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose [OK]
[
100
Saving Shooting Settings
Before Use
●
●
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
] button when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu
[
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
(
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
removed from My Menu.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rearranging Menu Items
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Settings that can be saved
Access the setting screen.
1
● Shooting mode ([ ], [
], [
], or [ ])
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Items set in [ ], [
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
], [
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button to choose an
icon to move. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to choose the new
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
position, and then press the [ ] or [
button.
]
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
1
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose [OK]
Configure the setting.
2
[
z Press the [
] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Save the settings.
Index
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
101
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
3
Before Use
●
●
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
z Press the [
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly
from a single screen.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
Access the setting screen.
1
[
] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes].
z Press the [
] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
●
●
On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
Configure the setting.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Appendix
z Choose up to five menu items to save
Index
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
[
z [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[
] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ] button.
102
Before Use
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.
Enter Playback mode.
6
1
z Press the [
] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Your last shot is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Browse through your images.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
[
] dial clockwise.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
button to enter Playback mode.
]
●
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display mode),
turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn
the [ ] dial to browse through images.
Accessories
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Index
z Movies are identified by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
103
Play movies.
3
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
access the movie control panel, choose
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button again.
]
Adjust the volume.
4
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
z You can also choose images in Scroll
Display mode by dragging left or right.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
( )
1
Pause playback.
5
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or
down.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
z After the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
z To start movie playback, touch [ ] in step
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
●
●
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
z To stop playback, touch the screen.
The screen at left is displayed, and the
camera is ready for your next operation.
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
] tab ► [Resume] ► [Last
Accessories
shot].
z Touch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
●
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
Appendix
(
30) and choose your desired effect on the [
] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
Index
drag left or right.
z To resume playback, touch [ ].
z Touch [ ] to return to the screen in step
104
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Switching Display Modes
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Histogram
Still Images
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z The graph in detailed information display
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
No Information Display
(
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
z The histogram can also be accessed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
z The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Accessories
Appendix
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
z Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
Index
(
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
105
Before Use
●
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
●
●
After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
You can also play digest movies by touching [
] on the
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
screen in step 1 and touching [OK] on the screen in step 2.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Viewing by Date
●
You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a movie.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [List/
] tab, and
Play Digest Movies] on the [
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Play the movie.
2
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button to start playback.
day of still image shooting as follows.
Choose an image.
1
z Choose a still image labeled with
Accessories
[
] and press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
Play the movie.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK].
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
106
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Navigating through Images in an Index
will be displayed.
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display images in an index.
1
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
] tab ► [Face ID Info]
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose an image.
2
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
Appendix
●
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
107
Choose [Image Search].
1
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z Press the [
choose [Image Search] on the [
] button, and then
] tab
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( 30).
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
Choose the first condition for image
display or navigation.
2
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
display filter.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
z When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
of these images together, press the [
button and go to step 4.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Choose the second condition and
check the images found.
3
Still Images
Movies
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the first condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
(
Favorites
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
People
z To switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 4.
Accessories
z When you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the next
screen to choose a person.
Appendix
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [
]
Index
Name
108
View the filtered images.
4
Using the Control Ring to Jump between
Images
Before Use
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
z To cancel filtered display, press the [
]
button.
Displays images tagged as favorites
Jump to Favorites
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
●
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Jump Shot Date
Jump 10 Images
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 4.
Options for viewing the images found (in step 4) include
Choose a condition.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
z Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[
] ring and then pressing the [ ][
]
buttons.
●
View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by the
specified amount.
2
found are no longer shown.
z Turn the [ ] ring to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Accessories
●
●
You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
2 and 3.
Appendix
After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
Index
109
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
●
During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
by dragging left or right with two fingers.
group can be manipulated at once.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] tab ► [Group
●
Turning the [ ] ring when browsing images in index display will
jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method
ungrouped during individual playback.
chosen in single-image display. However, if you have chosen [
or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
only shown immediately after you shoot.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
You can also view group images individually by touching [
on the screen in step 1.
]
Still Images
Movies
(
(
69) are grouped, and only the first image is displayed. However, you
can also view the images individually.
Choose a grouped image.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image labeled with
], and then press the [ ] button.
]
Accessories
[
Appendix
Index
View images in the group
individually.
2
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
] dial will display only images in the group.
[
z Pressing the [ ] button will display
[Display all images]. Press [ ] to cancel
group playback.
110
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
4
Before Use
Editing Face ID Information
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
Changing Names
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button and choose
Erasing Names
[Face ID Info] on the [
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z Following step 3 in “Changing Names”
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
[
] button.
Choose an image.
2
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
[
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
choose an image and press the [
button.
]
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
●
You can also erase names by touching [OK] after [Erase?] is
displayed.
Accessories
displayed in an image, press the [ ][
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [
button.
]
Appendix
Index
Choose the editing option.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
111
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
z Spread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Magnifying Images
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
Still Images
Movies
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Magnify an image.
1
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch [
display.
] to restore single-image
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
( )
1 2
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
z To move the display position, press the
Access the setting screen.
1
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [
] button, and then
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
choose [Slideshow] on the [
] tab
(
Accessories
●
●
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
pressing the [ ] button.
You can check the focus when [
Appendix
Configure the setting.
] is displayed by pressing
2
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check). When
multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button repeatedly to
switch to other positions.
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
Index
112
Start automatic playback.
Choose an image.
3
2
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
] button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
z Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
slideshow.
] button to stop the
z For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [ ] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
z Press the [
] button to restore
during slideshows.
single-image display.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
●
●
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●
You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
●
●
On the screen in step 2, touching an image above, below, or on
either side will show your chosen image in the center, surrounded
by the next four candidate images.
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle)
For full-screen display of the center image in step 2, touch that
image. To restore the original display, touch the screen again.
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
Appendix
Index
Choose Smart Shuffle.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Smart
] tab, and then press
Shuffle] on the [
z Four candidate images are displayed.
113
Choosing Images Individually
Before Use
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
1
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
(
press the [ ] button.
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose an image.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
]
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
[Protect] on the [
] button and choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Choose a selection method.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2
Protect the image.
3
z Choose a menu item and an option as
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
●
●
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
●
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
Accessories
Appendix
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
●
●
You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching
Index
[
].
You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
114
Protect the images.
4
Selecting a Range
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select Range].
1
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
Choose a starting image.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4.
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Protecting All Images at Once
Choose [Protect All Images].
1
Choose an ending image.
3
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Protect the images.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
[
Index
z Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
115
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
Before Use
Erasing Images
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose an image to erase.
1
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [
Erase the image.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
Choose a selection method.
2
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose a menu item and an option as
z The current image is now erased.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
]
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
●
Pressing the [ ] button while [ ] images are displayed will
give you the option of choosing [Erase ], [Erase
[Erase ] for deletion.
], or
Choose [Select].
1
Accessories
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Appendix
press the [ ] button.
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Index
Choose an image.
2
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other images.
116
Erase the image.
3
Before Use
Rotating Images
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
Choose [Rotate].
1
z Press the [
[Rotate] on the [
] button and choose
Camera Basics
Selecting a Range
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Choose [Select Range].
1
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Rotate the image.
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Choose images.
2
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Erase the images.
3
z To return to the menu screen, press the
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
[
] button.
●
●
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
Specifying All Images at Once
Accessories
On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to rotate
images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.
Choose [Select All Images].
1
Appendix
z Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Index
Erase the images.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
117
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Before Use
Tagging Images as Favorites
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
z Press the [
Rotate] on the [
] button, choose [Auto
] tab, and then choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Favorites].
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
]
z To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
Accessories
images.
Finish the setup process.
Appendix
3
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
118
Before Use
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
●
●
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
)
Using Touch Actions Functions
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Drag across the screen as shown.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
●
●
You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
Accessories
Appendix
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, and then
Index
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
]
119
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
2
Before Use
Editing Still Images
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the function to assign.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
memory card has sufficient free space.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignable Functions
●
●
●
You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Favorites
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
[
Next Favorite
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Previous Favorite
Next Date
Switch to displaying the first image with the next
shooting date.
Resizing Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Switch to displaying the first image with the
previous shooting date.
Still Images
Movies
Previous Date
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
Smart Shuffle
To Camera
Start Smart Shuffle playback.
Choose [Resize].
1
To Smartphone
To Computer
z Press the [
[Resize] on the [
] button and choose
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(
To Printer
To Web Service
Slideshow
Erase
Choose an image.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Start a slideshow.
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
Erase an image.
Protect
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate an image.
Choose an image size.
3
Index
Rotate
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [Save new image?] is displayed.
120
Save the new image.
4
Cropping
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
z The image is now saved as a new file.
Choose [Cropping].
1
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
Review the new image.
5
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button. [Display new
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
image?] is displayed.
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
z The saved image is now displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
( )
1
( )
2
( )
3
Adjust the cropping area.
3
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
z A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
RAW images cannot be edited.
z The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
●
Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
●
●
You can also configure this setting by touching the size on the
screen in step 3, touching it again, and then touching [OK].
You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 5.
lever.
Accessories
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
z To change the frame orientation, press
the [ ] button.
Index
z Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the [ ] dial to switch to the
other frame.
z Press the [
] button.
121
Save as a new image and review.
Choose an image.
4
2
Before Use
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
(
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
]
Choose an option.
3
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
RAW images cannot be edited.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
●
●
●
Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save as a new image and review.
4
after cropping.
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
●
●
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
●
●
To move the frame, drag either image on the screen in step 3.
screen in step 3.
●
●
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select
it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Accessories
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
Appendix
Choose [My Colors].
1
Index
z Press the [
] button, and then
] tab
choose [My Colors] on the [
(
122
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Before Use
●
You can also configure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the
screen in step 3.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
Choose [i-Contrast].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, and then
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
1
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, and then
(
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [
]
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Choose an image.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Choose an option.
3
Correct the image.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
Save as a new image and review.
4
z Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Accessories
(
Appendix
●
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
Save as a new image and review.
4
Index
●
●
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new file.
●
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
z Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
123
Before Use
Editing Movies
●
●
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end
●
●
●
Protected images cannot be overwritten.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ],
but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
button.
●
You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the
screen in step 4.
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
1
Specify portions to cut.
2
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
]
or [ ].
z To view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
( )
2
Accessories
z If you move [ ] to a position other than a
[
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
Appendix
[
] mark on the right will be cut.
Index
124
Review the edited movie.
3
Reducing File Sizes
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
]
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
press the [ ] button.
[
then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save the edited movie.
4
●
●
●
Compressed movies are saved in [
] movies cannot be compressed.
] format.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
●
You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
z The movie is now saved as a new file.
●
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
Accessories
●
●
●
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
Appendix
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
Index
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
125
Editing Digest Movies
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
Select the clip to erase.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
]
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
Confirm erasure.
3
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Appendix
[
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
Index
●
[
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
126
Before Use
Available Wi-Fi Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
7
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Computer
Wi-Fi Functions
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can
also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
127
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Before Use
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
Install CameraWindow.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
z For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the
smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
CameraWindow app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
No matter how you connect the devices, you can also use the
z For other Android smartphones, find
CameraWindow in Google Play and
download and install the app.
z For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find
CameraWindow in the App Store and
download and install the app.
Press the [ ] button.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button.
Appendix
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
Index
(
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
[
128
Choose [ ].
Choose a smartphone to connect to.
3
6
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
z Choose the smartphone (either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
]
z After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Import images.
7
z Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
●
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions.
Start CameraWindow.
5
z For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark
) will start CameraWindow on the
Accessories
(
smartphone.
Appendix
z For other smartphones, start
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
Index
z After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
129
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
For better security, you can display a password on the screen
Install CameraWindow.
1
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CameraWindow on a smartphone.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign
] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
2
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If a screen requesting the device
nickname is displayed, enter the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [ ].
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
]
Accessories
Choose [Add a Device].
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Appendix
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Index
130
Before Use
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
z Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
Camera Basics
Adjust the privacy setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
]
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Send images.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
6
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
[Off].
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
]
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Accessories
Appendix
z To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
Index
[
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures starting from step 1.
131
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
5
Using Another Access Point
Before Use
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Prepare for the connection.
1
settings and send images.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen.
Camera Basics
Previous Access Points
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2
3
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
Choose [Switch Network].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
Accessories
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
4
Appendix
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
Index
z For non-WPS access points, follow steps
access point and choose the smartphone.
132
Installing the Software
Before Use
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
What you will need:
● Computer
Camera Basics
● USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Download the software.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z With a computer connected to the
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
z Access the site for your country or region.
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
z Download the software.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Begin the installation.
2
●
●
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
z Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
For details, check the following website.
When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
Accessories
3
Appendix
Index
133
When Connecting the Camera to the
Computer
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
Before Use
( )
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
( )
1
Confirm that the computer is
1
connected to an access point.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
Without Connecting the Camera
z Select [Install without connecting the device]
and follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation process.
●
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
Install the files.
4
- Turn on media streaming.
z Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
Accessories
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
z Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
Appendix
z After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the cable.
Index
●
Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
●
Because the content and functions of software vary according to
the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use
each camera to update to its latest version of the software.
134
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Before Use
●
●
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
●
●
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
Camera Basics
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
2
Accessories
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
Appendix
●
●
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
Index
(
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
[
135
Choose [ ].
Choose the target device.
3
8
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
9
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [WPS Connection].
5
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
Choose [PBC Method].
6
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
Display CameraWindow.
10
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
Accessories
Establish the connection.
7
Appendix
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
Index
z On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
136
Import images.
11
Connecting to Listed Access Points
Before Use
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
View the listed access points.
1
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z View the listed networks (access points)
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose an access point.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Enter the access point password.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
] button.
(
]
[Off].
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
[
Choose [Auto].
4
●
●
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
] button.
]
Accessories
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
[
●
●
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Appendix
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
Index
137
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service
Registering Web Services
●
●
To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
Camera Basics
●
When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed after connection, and then either follow the procedure in
step 2.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
138
Choose [
].
4
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
], and then
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera web link
settings page.
1
Choose [Authenticate].
5
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z From a computer or smartphone, access
iMAGE GATEWAY.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Authenticate], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Establish a connection with an
access point.
6
z Connect to the access point as described
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose the type of camera.
2
z On this camera model, [
] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
z Once you choose [
], a page is
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
Accessories
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
3
z Press the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
Appendix
Enter the authentication code.
7
z On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
z Press the [ ] button.
Index
z When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
z A six-digit confirmation number is
displayed.
(
screen, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
[
139
Check the confirmation numbers
and complete the setup process.
8
Registering Other Web Services
Before Use
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
z Make sure the confirmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Access the Web service settings
screen.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
z Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the Web service you want
to use.
2
GATEWAY are now added as
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
destinations, and the [
to [ ].
] icon changes
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z A message is displayed on the
Choose [
].
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is finished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
3
z In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
], and then
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
Accessories
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and
choose a device.
Appendix
●
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Index
140
Uploading Images to Web Services
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose the destination.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose the icon of the Web service for
sharing (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
] button.
Send images.
3
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
]
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
Index
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed. Press the [ ] button to return
to the playback screen.
141
Choose the printer.
5
Before Use
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected
Printer
z Choose the printer name (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
then press the [ ] button.
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Choose an image to print.
6
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
] button.
z For detailed printing instructions, see
Choose [ ].
2
[
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To cancel the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
Choose [Add a Device].
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
]
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Accessories
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Appendix
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Index
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
Connect the printer to the network.
4
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on
the camera to establish a connection.
142
Send images.
4
Before Use
Sending Images to Another Camera
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
]
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
Choose [ ].
2
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Choose [Add a Device].
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
Accessories
(
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
[Off].
Appendix
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Index
143
Notes on Sending Images
Before Use
Image Sending Options
● Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
(
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Sending Multiple Images
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to five
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Select and send].
1
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
send], and then press the [ ] button.
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose images.
2
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you finish choosing images, press
the [
Accessories
] button.
Appendix
Send the images.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
Index
[
●
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
144
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
Before Use
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [
button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
]
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
Initial Preparations
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Movies cannot be resized.
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Add [ ] as a destination.
1
Adding Comments
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
z To choose a Web service as the
destination, follow the steps in
Access the screen for adding
1
comments.
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
2
z On the image transfer screen, choose
[
] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
Accessories
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button and choose
Appendix
2
3
Send the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Index
]
●
●
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
145
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
3
Sending Images
Before Use
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
z Press the [ ] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Send images.
1
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
z If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [ ] as described in steps
Preparing the Computer
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
Install the software.
1
z Once the connection is established,
the images are sent. When the images
have been sent successfully to the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [ ] is
displayed on the screen.
z Install the software on a computer
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Register the camera.
2
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Save the images to the computer.
2
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
Accessories
Appendix
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
●
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
Index
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
146
Before Use
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
●
●
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
CameraWindow.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Geotagging Images on the Camera
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
●
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
●
Accessories
Appendix
Index
147
Shooting Remotely
Before Use
●
●
The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have configured in advance
may be changed automatically.
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Movie shooting is not available.
Secure the camera.
1
z Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
●
●
●
Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the camera and
2
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose remote shooting.
3
z In CameraWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
z The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
z Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
Accessories
z At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
4
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
148
Before Use
Connection
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Configurable Items
Web
Services
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Editing Connection Information
O
O
O
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
–
O
: Configurable
: Not configurable
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Changing a Device Nickname
on.
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of the
device to edit, and then press the [
button.
Device Nickname] and press the [
button.
]
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [Edit a Device].
2
z Select the input field and press the [
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
Erasing Connection Information
Choose a device to edit.
3
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
Accessories
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
Connection Info] and press the [
button.
Appendix
]
Choose an item to edit.
4
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
dial to choose an item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
[
]
z The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
z The connection information will be
erased.
149
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Before Use
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [
] button and choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Reset Settings].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Restore the default settings.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
●
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
Accessories
Appendix
Index
150
Before Use
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
8
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Setting Menu
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
●
●
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down.
Adjusting the Volume
Accessories
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
Appendix
button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
Index
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
151
Customizing Sounds
World Clock
Before Use
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Sound Options], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
[
][ ] buttons to choose an option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Specify your destination.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
●
The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
] mode
[
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Hiding Hints and Tips
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
z Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
][ ] buttons.
[
z Press the [ ] button.
Switch to the destination time zone.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
]
Date and Time
Appendix
Adjust the date and time as follows.
(
Index
z Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
●
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
152
Lens Retraction Timing
Power-Saving Adjustment
Before Use
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
the [
immediately after you press the [
] button, set the retraction timing to
z Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [ ] button.
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
z After choosing an item, press the [ ][
buttons to adjust it as needed.
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
Using Eco Mode
●
●
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
These power-saving functions are not available when you have
Configure the setting.
1
z Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
Screen Brightness
[On].
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
z Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
2
●
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in
single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting
on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold
the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the camera.
153
Start-Up Screen
Before Use
●
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Start-up Image], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Formatting Memory Cards
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Low-Level Formatting
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Access the [Format] screen.
1
z Choose [Format], and then press the [
button.
]
z On the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
Choose [OK].
choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
Accessories
then press the [ ] button.
formatting process.
Appendix
Format the memory card.
3
●
●
Index
z To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
of the memory card.
]
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
z When formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
154
File Numbering
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Before Use
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
z Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Electronic Level Calibration
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
Continuous
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
Auto Reset
cards, or when a new folder is created.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
level the camera in advance.
●
●
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
Make sure the camera is level.
1
z Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
Calibrate the electronic level.
2
on the card folder structure and image formats.
z Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
Date-Based Image Storage
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
Appendix
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Index
z Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
155
Resetting the Electronic Level
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
Before Use
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
button.
button to access the keyboard, and enter
z Press the [
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] button. When [Accept
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Deactivating Touch-Screen Operations
The touch-screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch
operations.
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose [Touch Operation], and then
choose [Off].
●
●
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
copyright information. Some characters entered with the software may
not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
You can check copyright information recorded in images by using
the software, once you save the images to a computer.
●
Increasing Touch-Screen Panel Sensitivity
Accessories
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased, so that the camera
responds to a lighter touch.
Deleting All Copyright Information
Appendix
z Choose [Touch Response], and then
choose [High].
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
Index
and choose [Delete Copyright Info].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
156
Adjusting Other Settings
Before Use
●
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Checking Certification Logos
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Restoring Defaults
z Choose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the [Reset All] screen.
1
z Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Display Language
Restore default settings.
2
Change the display language as needed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
z Choose [Language ], and then press
the [ ] button.
[
z Default settings are now restored.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
●
The following functions are not restored to default settings.
Accessories
[Language
●
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
Appendix
- Shooting mode chosen in [
the [
] button.
modes
Index
157
Before Use
System Map
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Included Accessories
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
9
Wrist Strap
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2
Accessories
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Memory Card
Card Reader
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Computer
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Power
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
Cables
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC110
TV/Video
System
Accessories
Flash Unit
Cases
Appendix
Index
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Waterproof Case
WP-DC54
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
158
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
Before Use
Optional Accessories
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Power Supplies
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Battery Pack NB-13L
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
●
The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
Accessories
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Appendix
Index
159
Other Accessories
Before Use
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
z For powering the camera using
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Waterproof Case WP-DC54
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
z For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
●
●
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
z Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
z External flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
●
High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [
shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
], or [
]
Accessories
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
Appendix
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Index
160
Before Use
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback on a TV
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the TV on and switch to video
input.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
●
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
Turn the camera on.
4
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera on.
Playback on a High-Definition TV
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with
a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at a resolution of
z When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
[
], [
], or [
] can be viewed in high definition.
●
●
It is not possible to connect the USB cable or an optional stereo
AV cable at the same time as an HDMI cable. Forcing the cables
into the camera at the same time may damage the camera or
cables.
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
1
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
Accessories
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
the HDMI input as shown.
Appendix
Index
●
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
161
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Before Use
●
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while
previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow
the same steps as when using the camera screen. However,
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
(
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
1
2
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Connect the camera to the TV.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
z On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
Make sure the camera is off.
1
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Open the cover.
2
( )
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
( )
1
open the memory card/battery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown.
Insert the coupler.
3
z Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Display images.
3
Accessories
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
( )
1
images.
Appendix
●
●
Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
Index
z Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the port (1).
video output format, press the [
[Video System] on the [ ] tab.
] button and choose
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
( )
1
162
Close the cover.
4
Before Use
Using the Software
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
( )
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
( )
1
Software
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,
you can do the following things on your computer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connect the power cord.
5
● CameraWindow
z Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
- Import images and change camera settings
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● ImageBrowser EX
- Manage images: view, search, and organize
- Print and edit images
z Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
z When finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Digital Photo Professional
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
●
●
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the
camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera.
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
●
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
163
Computer Connections via a Cable
Saving Images to a Computer
Before Use
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Connect the camera to the
1
computer.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Windows
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS
( )
2
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
Operating
System*
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
* When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
●
Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
z Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Installing the Software
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
2
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
Accessories
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
Appendix
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
Index
z In the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
164
Before Use
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
●
●
●
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [
icon in the taskbar.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
Camera Basics
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Double-click [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Save the images to the computer.
3
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available,
such as movie editing.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Accessories
Appendix
Index
165
Turn the camera on.
4
Before Use
Printing Images
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Choose an image.
5
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Access the printing screen.
6
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
Easy Print
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Print the image.
7
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
] button.
]
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Printing now begins.
Make sure the camera and printer
1
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
are off.
Connect the camera to the printer.
2
z When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
●
●
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
Accessories
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
RAW images cannot be printed.
Appendix
Index
Turn the printer on.
3
166
Cropping Images before Printing
Configuring Print Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
Access the printing screen.
1
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
Choose [Cropping].
1
(
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[
Configure the settings.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then choose
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
]
] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
Adjust the cropping frame as needed.
2
z To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
File No. Prints images with the file number added.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To move the frame, press the
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
Both
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
–
Off
Default Matches current printer settings.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
–
Off
Print the image.
3
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
On
to print.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
Accessories
No. of
Copies
–
●
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Choose the number of copies to print.
Appendix
Cropping
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
Index
–
(
167
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Available Layout Options
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Prints with blank space around the image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Bordered
Choose [Paper Settings].
1
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 3:2.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ID Photo
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Choose a paper size.
Fixed Size
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [ID Photo].
1
Choose a type of paper.
3
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
(
the [ ] button.
Choose the long and short side
length.
2
Choose a layout.
4
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
z When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
]
Index
Choose the printing area.
3
z Press the [ ] button.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
area.
Print the image.
5
Print the image.
4
168
Printing Movie Scenes
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the printing screen.
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory
card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as
follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) standards.
1
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
press the [ ] button.
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
RAW images cannot be included in print list.
[
] button. This screen is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a printing method.
Configuring Print Settings
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
Still Images
Movies
[
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing
method.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and configure items as desired
Print the image.
3
(
Movie Printing Options
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Sequence
Accessories
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Print Type
Index
Appendix
Both
On
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
●
●
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
Date
Index
–
Off
[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
On
Images are printed with the file number.
–
File No.
Off
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
On
Off
Clear DPOF
data
–
169
Specify the number of prints.
3
Before Use
●
●
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Printing quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
●
●
●
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
z When finished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Still Images
Movies
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
1
(
z Press the [
] button, choose
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Choose an image.
2
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
z You can now specify the number of
copies.
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
170
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Adding Images to a Photobook
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Camera Basics
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
Auto Mode /
Choosing a Selection Method
Hybrid Auto Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
z Press the [
] button, choose
] tab, and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
then choose how you will select images.
z When images have been added to the
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software
Accessories
information.
Appendix
Index
171
Adding Images Individually
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
1
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
]
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Choose an image.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
z [ ] is displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
Appendix
]
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
172
Before Use
Troubleshooting
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
10
Power
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Appendix
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Helpful information when using the camera
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
The lens is not retracted.
●
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
The battery pack is swollen.
Accessories
●
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Display on a TV
Index
173
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
Shooting
Before Use
●
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Cannot shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Subjects in shots look too dark.
●
●
●
●
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Camera Basics
●
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
No date stamp is added to images.
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
●
Although date stamps cannot be added to images with this camera, images can
be printed with the date as follows.
-
-
Use the software to print
Print using printer functions
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
●
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
[
●
●
●
●
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case,
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
White spots appear in flash shots.
●
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Accessories
Shots are out of focus.
Shots look grainy.
●
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●
Appendix
●
●
●
●
●
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
Index
●
be activated in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
Shots are blurry.
●
Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
●
174
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
Playback
Before Use
●
Playback is not possible.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
●
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
for details on folder structure and file names.
●
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
●
●
●
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Sound is not played during movies.
●
in the movie is faint.
Shooting Movies
●
because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
Memory Card
(
The memory card is not recognized.
●
[
●
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
-
-
-
Accessories
●
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
Appendix
Zooming is not possible.
-
Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
●
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
●
Index
Subjects look distorted.
●
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
175
Cannot resize images for sending.
Wi-Fi
Before Use
●
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
●
Movies cannot be resized.
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
●
try again.
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or
●
In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display
according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
[
●
●
Movies may take a long time to send.
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
displayed.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
] is
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Cannot add a device/destination.
●
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●
●
●
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on
To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
Accessories
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
Appendix
●
●
●
●
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
Index
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
176
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
Before Use
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
●
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identification information
No memory card
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
●
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Memory card locked
●
The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Cannot record!
Invalid selection range
●
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
●
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Exceeded selection limit
●
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
●
●
●
(
(
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
Insufficient space on card
●
(
(
Naming error!
●
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
Touch AF unavailable
●
Accessories
Touch AF canceled
(
●
Appendix
Lens Error
●
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
Index
used in dusty or sandy locations.
No Image.
●
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
177
A camera error was detected (error number)
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
Before Use
●
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
●
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●
●
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
File Error
●
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Sending failed
Memory card error
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Print error
●
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
Ink absorber full
●
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
●
Receiving failed
Naming error!
●
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
●
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Cannot determine access point
Insufficient space on server
●
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
Accessories
●
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
reconnecting again.
space.
●
Appendix
No access points found
●
●
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Check network settings
●
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
Index
network settings.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●
IP address conflict
●
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
178
Before Use
On-Screen Information
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Information Display)
(
(
)
33
(
)( )( ) ( )( )( ) (
)
(
)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
(
20
)
)
19
( )
1
(
)
30
Auto Mode /
( )
2
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
3
(27) Exposure compensation level
(
)
21
( )
4
(38) Exposure compensation level
(
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
5
(
(
) (
)
34 35
( )
6
( )
7
(
)
36
( )
8
(
)
)
31
( )
9
(
32
(
)
22
(
)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
10
Battery Level
(
)( ) (
)
(
) (
)
(
) (
)
23 24 25
26 27
28 29
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
(
)
(
)
37
38
Display
Details
Sufficient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
(Blinking red)
(3) Flash exposure compensation / Flash
Accessories
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
[Charge the battery]
Appendix
(16) Digital zoom magnification
Index
(
(
179
(30) Compression (image quality)
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Before Use
(
(32) File size
( )
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
( ) ( )( )( )
( )( )( )( )
(
) (
)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
(movies)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
12
13
14
15
16
●
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
)
(
) ( ) (
)
(
) ( )(
)
17
18 19 20
21 22 23
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Summary of Movie Control Panel
(
) (
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
24 26
28
30
31
32
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The following operations are available on the movie control panel
(
25
) (
)
(
)
27
29
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
]
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Accessories
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
(10) Folder number - File number
Appendix
(
Index
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
(28) Image quality / Frame rate
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
(15) Exposure compensation level
●
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
(
180
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black icons, such as
Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons, such as
.
.
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
*3 /
/
*3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Aperture Value
/
/
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shutter Speed
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
181
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
4
*1 / *5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
6
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*7 / *7 / *7 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*7 / *8 / *8 /
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*9 / *9 / *9 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*9 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 ] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
*3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
*5 Only with ISO Auto selected.
[
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*6 When [
*7 Only when [
] is selected.
*8 Only available when faces are detected.
*9 Only in manual focus mode.
182
FUNC. Menu
Before Use
125 – 12800
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
AUTO
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
183
Before Use
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Color Adjustment (Biaxial,
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
5
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Delay*
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
/
/
*3 / *3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
6
Shots*
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
184
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*7 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
185
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Advanced settings not available.
*3 White balance is not available.
*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
*5 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*6 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
Before Use
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1.6x/2.0x
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
Shooting Tab
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
On
2
Face AiAF*
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
1-point
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
3
On
Normal
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
Off
Small
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*4 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
On
Standard
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
186
Off
*1 /
/
/
4x
*1 /
/
/
Before Use
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On
On
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Off
Off
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
On
Peaking
On/Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Level
Low/High
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
Off
Appendix
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2x
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
187
Safety FE
On
Before Use
Flash Mode
Auto
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Flash Exp. Comp
Max ISO Speed
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Flash Output
Rate of Change
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shutter Sync.
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Low/Standard/High
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
Red-Eye Lamp
On
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On/Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
188
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Center
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Hold
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
AF Point
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display Info
Off
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Detailed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto/Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
Display Time
Off/Quick
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
189
Dynamic IS
Before Use
1
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Include Stills/No Stills
On/Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Save
On/Off
IS Mode
Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Sharp/Off/Soft
Continuous
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
Shoot Only
Star Visibility
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
Standard/Prominent
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
190
Set
Set
Before Use
Effect
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Shot Interval
15 sec./30 sec./1 min.
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Frame Rate
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
/
*2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*3 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
Shooting Time
60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
On/Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
191
Set Up Tab
My Menu Tab
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Mute
My Menu settings
Volume
Sound Options
Hints & Tips
Date/Time
Playback Tab
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Item
Ref. Page
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Search
List/Play Digest Movies
Smart Shuffle
Slideshow
Time Zone
Lens Retraction
Eco Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Power Saving
LCD Brightness
Start-up Image
Format
Erase
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Protect
Rotate
Favorites
File Numbering
Create Folder
Units
Photobook Set-up
i-Contrast
Red-Eye Correction
Cropping
Electronic Level
Video System
Touch Operation
Touch Response
Wi-Fi Settings
Mobile Device Connect Button
Copyright Info
Certification Logo Display
Language
Accessories
Resize
My Colors
Appendix
Face ID Info
Transition Effect
Index Effect
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
Resume
Index
Reset All
192
Item
Ref. Page
Before Use
Handling Precautions
Set Touch Actions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Print Tab
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
Item
Ref. Page
–
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Print
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
Select Images & Qty.
Select Range
Select All Images
Clear All Selections
Print Settings
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, charge it about once a year and use up the remaining
charge before storage.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
193
Wi-Fi
Before Use
Specifications
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Standards
Camera Specifications
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Communication
Modes
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Lens Focal
Length
4.2x zoom: 8.8 (W) – 36.8 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 24 (W) – 100 (T) mm)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Supported
Channels
1 – 11 (PC2201) or 1 – 13 (PC2155)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 1,040,000 dots
LCD Monitor
File Format
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Security
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF
(version 1.1) compliant
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon
Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
Data Type
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
24 – 403.2 mm
Digital Zoom [Standard]
(Represents the combined focal length
Hi-speed USB
of optical and digital zoom.)
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Interface
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x
38.4 ‒ 160.0 mm
48.0 ‒ 200.0 mm
Battery Pack NB-13L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
Power Source
Dimensions
Accessories
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
103.0 x 60.4 x 40.4 mm (4.06 x 2.38 x 1.59 in.)
Appendix
Approx. 304 g (approx. 10.72 oz.; including the
battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 279 g (approx. 9.84 oz.; camera body only)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Index
194
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Before Use
Number of Shots
Approx. 210
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On)
Movie Recording Time*1
Approx. 310
Approx. 40 minutes
Number of Shots per Memory
Compression
Card (Approx. shots)
Recording Pixels
Movie Recording Time
Approx. 1 hour, 10 minutes
Approx. 4 hours
Ratio
(Continuous Shooting*2)
Camera Basics
8 GB
32 GB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Playback Time
852
3441
(Large)
20M/
5472x3648
Auto Mode /
*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed,
such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
Hybrid Auto Mode
1379
1320
2098
4234
7442
24562
35089
5568
5329
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(Medium 1)
12M/
4320x2880
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
8472
17091
30040
99135
141622
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
(Medium 2)
4M/2304x1536
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
(Small)
0.3M/720x480
RAW Images
5472x3648
–
342
1385
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
195
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Range
Before Use
Maximum Wide Angle
Maximum Telephoto
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Focusing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Quality
(
)
(
)
Mode
Range
8 GB
32 GB
–
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity
30 min. 03 sec.
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
43 min. 29 sec.*1
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.*2
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
*
*
–
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.
Auto Mode /
Other
modes
Hybrid Auto Mode
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
1.5 – 20 m (4.9– 66 ft.) 1.5 – 20 m (4.9 – 66 ft.)
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting Mode
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
seconds when shooting in [
1 hour when shooting in [
], [
] or [
], or approximately
].
Speed
Approx. 6.5 shots/sec.
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Flash Range
Accessories
● Using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specified in Canon testing
standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
Maximum wide angle (
Maximum telephoto (
)
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
40 cm – 4.0 m (1.3 – 13 ft.)
Appendix
)
Index
196
Shutter Speed
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Before Use
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
[
] mode,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 – 1/2000 sec.
automatically set
range
Rated Output:
Charging Time:
Charge Indicator:
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Available values in
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
[
], [ ], or [
]
mode (sec.)*1*2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 In [
] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.
*2 In [ ] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
f/number
f/1.8 – f/11 (W), f/2.8 – f/11 (T)
Available values in
[
mode*
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0, f/9.0, f/10, f/11
], [ ], or [
]
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-13L
Accessories
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Appendix
Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Index
Dimensions:
29.6 x 42.0 x 9.5 mm
(1.17 x 1.65 x 0.37 in.)
Weight:
Approx. 22 g (approx. 0.78 oz.)
197
Editing or erasing connection
Exposure
Focusing range
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Numbers
FUNC. menu
A
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
G
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
F
H
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Handheld nightscene
High dynamic range
D
Date/time
B
Background defocus
Batteries
Flash
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery pack
→
Defaults Reset all
I
Accessories
Focusing
Appendix
→
Image quality Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Index
Servo AF 85
E
Editing
C
→
Playback Viewing
Camera
198
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory
Star time-lapse movie
P
Before Use
→
cards Memory cards
J
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Face self-timer
Wink self-timer
L
→
Playback Viewing
T
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Toy camera effect
M
Sending images to another
Servo AF 85
→
→
→
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
AC adapter kit
Battery charger
Battery pack
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Program AE 73
Menu
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting
Q
→
Shooting date/time Date/time
U
Movies
Underwater macro
R
RAW 90
Software
V
Image quality (resolution/frame
Accessories
Saving images to
Appendix
S
Index
Screen
Star nightscape
N
→
Menu FUNC. menu, Menu
199
W
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
→
Wrist strap Strap
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Z
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
200
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
Before Use
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
- Removing the certification labels from the product
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Security Precautions
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
Accessories
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
Appendix
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
Index
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
201
● Unauthorized network access
Trademarks and Licensing
Before Use
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Accessories
Disclaimer
Appendix
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
Index
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
202
|